2012 chevrolet impala owner manual m · chevrolet impala owner manual - 2012 black plate (3,1)...

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual - 2012

2012 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-35Universal Remote System . . . . 5-40

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-27Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-45


2012 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-13

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, IMPALA,and the IMPALA Emblem aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name "GeneralMotors of Canada Limited" forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20864990 B Second Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page numberwhere it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-8Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-9Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-10Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-14Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-17Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-18Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-18Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑4.

B. Remote Trunk Release Button.See Trunk on page 2‑9.

C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

D. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑10.

E. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3.

F. Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23.

G. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑14.

H. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

I. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

J. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Dome Lamp Control. See DomeLamps on page 6‑6.

K. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27 (If Equipped).

L. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

M. Cruise Control on page 9‑30.

N. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

O. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑16.

P. Horn on page 5‑3.

Q. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 (If Equipped).

R. Ignition Positions on page 9‑15.

S. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

T. Power Outlets on page 5‑8.

U. Center Console Shift Lever(If Equipped). See Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑19.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.


1-4 In Brief

Press K to unlock the driver door.Press again within five seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback canbe personalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑35 foradditional information.

Press and holdV forapproximately one second to openthe trunk.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.


In Brief 1-5

Door Locks

Manual Locks

From outside the vehicle, use thekey in the door or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter tolock or unlock the vehicle. From theinside, pull up or push down on themanual door lock knobs.

See Door Locks on page 2‑6.

Power Door Locks

Power door lock switches arelocated on the front doors near thehandle.

Q : Press the bottom of the switchto lock all doors.

K : Press the top of the switch tounlock all doors.

For more information, see:. Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.. Delayed Locking on page 2‑7.

Trunk ReleaseTo open the trunk from the outside,pressV on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Or, use the key in the lock cylinder,if equipped.

To open the trunk from the inside,pressV. See Trunk on page 2‑9.

Windows

The power window switches are onthe driver door armrest. Eachpassenger door has a switch thatcontrols only that window.

To lower the window, press and holdthe front of the switch to the firstposition until the window is at thedesired level. To raise the window,pull up and hold the front of theswitch.

For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2‑16.


1-6 In Brief

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front edgeof the seat cushion to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

To adjust the seatback, see “ManualReclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe front or rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Power Reclining Seatback

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”under Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.


In Brief 1-7

Manual Lumbar

Move the lever up or down toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Second Row SeatsOn vehicles with the flip and foldfeature, the bottom seat cushionscan be flipped forward and theseatback folded down to create anextended cargo area.

The vehicle also has an under seatstorage area.

See Rear Seats (Split Folding) onpage 3‑8.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3‑2and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑10.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑11.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑12.. Lap Belt on page 3‑17.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑41.


1-8 In Brief

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags,seat‐side impact airbags, androof‐rail airbags are not affectedby this.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

United States

Canada

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are on the driver doorarmrest.

Press the left or right side ofthe selector located above thecontrol pad to adjust the driver orpassenger mirror. Then press thecontrol pad to move the mirror in thedesired direction.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14.


In Brief 1-9

Interior Mirror

Vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror can be adjusted by holdingthe mirror in the center to move it fora clearer view behind the vehicle.Adjust the mirror to avoid glare fromthe headlamps behind. Pull thelever, located at the bottom of themirror for nighttime use. Return thelever to its original position for theday position.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑14.

On vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically adjust to reducethe glare of lights from behind thevehicle. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror on page 2‑15.

Steering WheelAdjustment

The tilt wheel lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the wheel and pull the levertoward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamp

The center mounted dome lampoverhead comes on when a door isopened. This lamp can also beturned on by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwise.

Reading Lamps

The vehicle has reading lamps thatalso act as the dome lamp. Pressthe button near each lamp to turnthem on and off.


1-10 In Brief

Map Lamps

The vehicle has map lamps on therearview mirror. Push the buttonnear each lamp to turn the maplamps on and off.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.. Courtesy Lamps on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

P : Briefly turn to this position tomanually turn the automatic lampcontrol and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or on. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, the off positiononly works when the vehicle isshifted into the P (Park) position.

AUTO: Automatically operates theheadlamps and other exterior lampsat normal brightness.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,instrument panel lights, taillamps,and license plate lamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps andother exterior lamps.

# : (If Equipped) Turns on the foglamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System onpage 6‑3.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering column.

8 : Single wipe, turn to8 , thenrelease. Several wipes, hold theband on8 longer.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.


In Brief 1-11

6 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

6 : Slow wipes.

? : Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

Push the paddleL at the top of thelever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4.

Climate ControlsThis vehicle may have a dual or single climate control system. The heating,cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation can be controlled with either of thesesystems.

Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Outside Air

C. Recirculation

D. Air Delivery Mode Control

E. Air Conditioning

F. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

G. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

H. Rear Window Defogger


1-12 In Brief

Single Zone

A. Fan Control

B. Outside Air

C. Temperature Control

D. Recirculation

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

F. Air Conditioning

G. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.


In Brief 1-13

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (Base)

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM™(if equipped) on the Radio withCD (Base).

f : Select radio stations.

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : For vehicles with RDS, press todisplay additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS orXM station; or CD, MP3, or WMAsong. If information is availableduring XM or CD playback, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, “No Info” displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment on page 7‑1.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.

For radios with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the6 softkeys located below the radio


1-14 In Brief

station frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAVto go through up to 6 pages offavorites, each having 6 favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

For radios without a FAV button, upto 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, and6 AM), can be programmed on the6 numbered buttons.

See Operation on page 7‑2.

Setting the Clock

To set the time for the Radio withCD (Base):

1. Press the H button until the hourbegins flashing on the display.Press H a second time and theminutes begin flashing on thedisplay.

2. To increase or decrease thetime, do one of the followingwhile the hours or minutes areflashing:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.

. Press\ FWD ors REV.

3. Press the H button again untilthe clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayedtime, or wait five seconds untilthe flashing stops and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock on page 5‑6.

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces.

XM satellite radio has awide variety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput jack, located on the audiofaceplate. External devices such asiPods®, MP3 players, etc. can beconnected to the auxiliary input jackusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jackcable.

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”under Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑18.


In Brief 1-15

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth‐enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see Bluetoothon page 7‑19.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, these controls arelocated on the right side of thesteering wheel.

w : Press to go to the next radiostation stored as a favorite, or thenext track if a CD is playing.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withthe OnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious radio station stored as afavorite, the next track if a CD isplaying, reject an incoming call,or end a current call.

SRCE: Press to choose betweenthe radio, CD, and auxiliaryinput jack.

+ e − e : Press to increase ordecrease volume.

¨ : Press to go to the next radiostation while in AM, FM, or XM.Press to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑3.


1-16 In Brief

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

J : Press to turn cruise control onand off. The indicator is lit whencruise control is on.

+RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET−: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

For more information, see CruiseControl on page 9‑30.

Power OutletsThe vehicle has three 12‐volt outletswhich can be used to plug inelectrical equipment, such as a cellphone or MP3 player.

On vehicles with a center console,one outlet is located inside thecenter floor console and two outletsare located at the front of theconsole bin under the instrumentpanel.

On vehicles without a centerconsole, two are located under theclimate controls and another outletfor the rear seat passengers is atthe rear of the center front seat.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑8.


In Brief 1-17

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a tractioncontrol system which limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. For vehicles with traction control,

press and release the ESCOFF buttonY located on theinstrument panel to turn offtraction control. The appropriateDIC message displays. SeeRide Control System Messageson page 5‑31.

. Press and release the ESC OFFbuttonY again to turn ontraction control.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑27.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The Electronic Stability Controlsystem assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and ESC, press and hold theESC OFF buttonY located on

the instrument panel until gilluminates and the appropriateDIC messages display. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑31.

. Press and release the ESC OFFbuttonY again to turn on bothsystems.

For more information, see ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.


1-18 In Brief

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑41.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑36. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑33.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.


In Brief 1-19

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:

U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyChevrolet/Owners Login”)

Canada: chevroletowner.ca

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 for more information.


1-20 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignitionand the driver's door. If the vehicleis a taxi model, the key can also beused in the trunk.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of your vehicle,contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑5 for more information.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.



If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

With Remote Start Shown, WithoutRemote Start Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirps

when Q is pressed again withinfive seconds. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑35 foradditional information.

Pressing Q may arm the contenttheft‐deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. If K is pressedagain within five seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on. If enabled through theDIC, the parking lamps flash twiceto indicate unlocking has occurred.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑35.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft‐deterrentsystem. See Anti-theft AlarmSystem on page 2‑11.



V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold for aboutone second to open the trunk. Thetransmission must be in P (Park).

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times. Press and holdL formore than two seconds to activatethe panic alarm. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsrepeatedly for 30 seconds. Thealarm turns off when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN orL is pressedagain. The ignition must be inLOCK/OFF for the panic alarmto work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.

When the replacement transmitteris programmed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to eighttransmitters programmed to it. Seeyour dealer to program newtransmitters.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. See“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTEKEY” under Key and LockMessages on page 5‑31 foradditional information.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool

into the notch located alongthe parting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.



3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that allows you tostart the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems and rear window defogger.When the remote start system isactive and the vehicle has anautomatic climate control system, itwill automatically regulate the insidetemperature. Normal operation ofthese systems will return after theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view when

doing so. Check local regulations forany requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif your vehicle is low on fuel. Yourvehicle may run out of fuel.

If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However, therange may be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

/ (Remote Start): This button willbe on the RKE transmitter if youhave remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q , then

immediately press and hold/for two to four seconds or untilthe vehicle's turn signal lampsflash. The doors will lock.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning.

The remote start feature providestwo separate starts per ignitioncycle, each with 10 minutes ofengine running time, or one startwith a time extension. The first startmust expire or be canceled to gettwo separate 10-minute starts.

If it is the first remote start since thevehicle has been driven, repeat theprevious steps, while the engine isstill running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes from thetime you repeat the steps for remotestarting. The remote start runningtime can be extended one time andonly after the first remote start.



After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

The engine will shut offautomatically after 10 minutes,unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle's key is insertedinto the ignition switch and turned toON/RUN.

To manually shut off a remote start,do any of the following.. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press andrelease/.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch out ofLOCK/OFF and then back toLOCK/OFF.

After the engine has been startedtwo times, or one time with a timeextension, the vehicle's ignitionmust be turned to ON/RUN usingthe key before the remote startprocedure can be used again. See

Ignition Positions on page 9‑15 forinformation regarding the ignitionpositions on your vehicle.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if any of the followoccur:. The vehicle's key is in the

ignition.. The vehicle's hood is open.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. The check engine light is on.

See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑16.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. The content theft-deterrent alarmhas been activated.

. Two remote vehicle starts,or one start with a timeextension, have already beenprovided for that ignition cycle.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

From the outside, use the key in thedriver door or use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter tolock and unlock the vehicle. Fromthe inside, use the manual or powerdoor locks.

To lock or unlock the driver sidedoor from the outside with the key,insert the key and turn it clockwiseor counterclockwise.

To lock or unlock the door from theinside, push or pull the manuallock knob.

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is locatedon both front doors next to the doorhandle.

Press the top of the switch to unlockall doors or press the bottom of theswitch to lock all doors.

If the vehicle has the optionalcontent theft-deterrent system andit is armed, the power door lockswitches will be disabled. You mustuse the RKE transmitter or the key

to unlock the doors when thesystem is armed. See Anti-theftAlarm System on page 2‑11.

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the driver todelay the actual locking of thedoors. When the driver power doorlock switch is pressed with the keyremoved from the ignition, and thedriver door open, a chime will soundthree times to signal that thedelayed locking system is active.When all doors have been closed,the doors will lock automaticallyafter several seconds. If any door isopened before this, the timer willreset itself once all the doors havebeen closed again.

Pressing the driver or passengerpower door lock switch again or theRKE transmitter button will overridethis feature.



Personal Choice Programming

The delayed locking feature canbe turned on or off, using theDriver Information Center (DIC) toprogram this feature. See “DELAYDOOR LOCK” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑35.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will automatically lockwhen the shift lever is moved out ofP (Park). The automatic door lockingfeature cannot be disabled.

Programmable Automatic DoorUnlock

The vehicle is programmed so thatwhen the shift lever is moved intoP (Park) all doors will unlock.

With the vehicle stopped and theengine running, door unlocking canbe programmed through promptsdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). These prompts allowthe driver to choose various unlock

settings. For programminginformation, see VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑35.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature helps prevent you fromlocking the doors while the key is inthe ignition. Always remember totake your key with you when exitingthe vehicle.

If the lock switch is pressed on thedoor that is open and the key is inthe ignition, all of the doors will lockand then the open door will unlock.A chime sounds continuously untilthe driver door is closed.

Safety LocksRear door security locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door security locks arelocated on the inside edge of eachrear door. The rear doors must beopened to access them.

To assist in finding the lock, thevehicle has the following:

To use the lock:

1. Insert the key into the securitylock slot and turn it so the slot isin the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.



To open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door by using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, if the vehicle hasone, by pressing the power doorlock switch, or by lifting the reardoor manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear doorsecurity lock:

1. Unlock the door and open it fromthe outside.

2. Insert the key into the securitylock slot and turn it so the slot isin the vertical position.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk from the outside,pressV on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Or, use the key in the lock cylinder,if equipped.



Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk from the inside,pressV. See Trunk on page 2‑9.

The trunk can also be opened bylowering the rear seat and pullingthe emergency trunk release handlelocated inside the trunk. See RearSeats (Split Folding) on page 3‑8and “Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle” following.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunkrelease handle located on the latchinside the trunk . This handle willglow following exposure to light. Pullthe release handle to open the trunkfrom the inside.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemYour vehicle may have the optionalcontent theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

To activate the theft-deterrentsystem:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the powerdoor lock switch or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.If you are using the RKEtransmitter, the door doesnot need to be open.

3. Close all doors.

Once armed, the alarm will go off ifsomeone tries to enter the vehiclewithout using the RKE transmitter ora key or turns the ignition on with anincorrect key. The horn will soundand the turn signal lamps will flashfor about 30 seconds.

When the alarm is armed, the trunkmay be opened with the RKEtransmitter. The power door lockswitches are disabled and the doorsremain locked. You must use yourRKE transmitter or your key tounlock the doors when the system isarmed.

Arming with the Power LockSwitch

The alarm system will arm whenyou use either power lock switch tolock the doors while any door isopen and the key is removed fromthe ignition. The alarm system willnot arm if the trunk is open whenyou use either power lock switch tolock the doors.

Arming with the RKETransmitter

The alarm system will arm whenyou use your RKE transmitter tolock the doors, if the key is not inthe ignition.

Disarming with the RKETransmitter

The alarm system will disarm whenyou use your RKE transmitter tounlock the doors.

The first time a remote unlockcommand is received, three flasheswill be seen and three horn chirpsheard to indicate an alarm conditionhas occurred since last arming.

Disarming with Your Key

The alarm system will disarm whenyou use your key to unlock thedoors or insert your key in theignition and turn it from the LOCK/OFF position.



ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, there may be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑29. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.

If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the PASS-Key III+ tohave a new key made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must seeyour dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key III+ to have keysmade and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.



To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If theengine will not start, see yourdealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds of turning theignition to the LOCK/OFFposition in Step 3.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If you lose or damage yourPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on the driverdoor armrest.

1. Press the left or right side of theselector switch located abovethe control pad, to select thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four buttonslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the outside rearviewmirrors. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Climate ControlSystems on page 8‑1 for moreinformation.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the inside rearview mirrorfor a clear view of the area behindyour vehicle. To avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind, push thetab forward for daytime and pull itfor nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.



Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar system. See your dealer formore information about OnStar andhow to subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when a window ispartially open. To reduce the sound,open another window or the sunroof(if equipped).



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The switches on the driver doorarmrest are used to control each ofthe windows. Each passenger doorhas its own window switch.

The power window switches workwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or whileRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑18.

To lower the window, press and holdthe front of the switch to the firstposition until the window is at thedesired level. To raise the window,pull up and hold the front of theswitch.

Express-Down Window

The driver window switch has anexpress-down feature labeledAUTO. This lets you lower thewindow completely without holdingthe switch. Press the front of theswitch to the second position andrelease.

To stop the window while it islowering, briefly pull up on theswitch.



Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The driverwindow switches also include alockout switch. Press the right sideof the switch to prevent the rearpassengers from using their windowswitches. The driver can still controlall the windows and the frontpassenger can control their ownwindow with the lockout on. Pressthe left side of the switch to return tonormal window operation. A red baron the right side of the switchindicates that the lockout is off.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof switches are on theoverhead console.



The sunroof can only be operatedwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑18.

Q (Vent/Express-Open): Press thisswitch once to vent the sunroofwhen it is closed. When using thevent, the sunshade should be fullyopened. The sunshade can beopened or closed manually bysliding it rearward or forward.

From the vent position, pressthis switch again to activate theexpress-open feature. Press theclose switch to stop movement ofthe sunroof. The sunshade willautomatically open when usingexpress‐open.

A deflector will automatically pop upwhen the sunroof is opened. Thedeflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

R (Close): Press and hold thisswitch until the sunroof motor stopsto close the sunroof, or release theswitch when the desired positionhas been reached.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise or plugging thewater drainage system. Periodicallyopen the sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromsunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats (Split Folding) . . . . . 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-18Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-21When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-31

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-32Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-38Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-40Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on top of theseatback, and push the head



restraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seat has headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The rear seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front edgeof the seat cushion to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.



Center Seat

The vehicle may have a front centerseat. There are cupholders on theunderside of the seat cushion. Touse them, flip the seat cushionforward. The seat can also be usedas a storage area by lowering theseatback. See Center ConsoleStorage on page 4‑2.

The seatback doubles as anarmrest for the driver or frontpassenger when the center seatis unoccupied.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe front or rear of the control upor down.

The driver seat may have powerreclining seatbacks. See “PowerReclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

Move the lever up or down toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.



Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate two for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

The heated seat are canceled eachtime the ignition is turned off. Touse this feature after restarting thevehicle, press the desired buttonagain.



Rear Seats

Rear Seats (Split Folding)

Flip and Fold Feature

On vehicles with this feature, theseat cushions flip forward and theseatbacks fold down to create anextended flat cargo area.

To flip the seat cushion and fold theseatback:

1. Make sure the front seats arenot reclined. The seat cushionwill not flip forward completely ifthe front seats are reclined.

2. Flip the seat cushion forwardby pulling up on the tab in thecenter of the seat cushion wherethe seatback meets the seatcushion.

3. Lower the seatback by pullingforward on the tab on theoutboard side of the seatback.



To return the seats to the normalposition:

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

1. Raise the seatback and makesure it latches.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

2. Make sure the safety belts areproperly stowed over theseatback in all three seatingpositions.

3. Flip the bottom seat cushionback into place. Push downfirmly on the seat cushion tomake sure it is secure.

When the seat is not in use, theseatback should be placed in theupright, locked position, and theseat cushion should be in the downposition.

Under Seat Storage

The vehicle has a storage areaunder the rear seat. See RearStorage on page 4‑2.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑13.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑33 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑35.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position(if equipped), which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt on page 3‑17 for moreinformation.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check if thecorrect buckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑17.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructions onuse and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thebelt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has shoulder belt heightadjusters for the driver and rightfront passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑11.

Squeeze the buttons (A) on thesides of the height adjuster andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

You can move the adjuster up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout squeezing the buttons tomake sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal andnear frontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash.



Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3‑18.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the guide out from thepocket on the edge of theseatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into the storage pocket onthe edge of the seatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Lap BeltThis section is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑12.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit in thecenter front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has noretractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position, and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 3‑17.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.



Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑13.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑18.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.



See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand passenger directly behindthe driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and passengerseated directly behind the rightfront passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat‐mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑23.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate withgreat force and faster than theblink of an eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑33 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑35.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat‐mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑19.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.



Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rollovers or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struck.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑23 for more information.



Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑24.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of

the windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off the

fuel system after the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If youare using remote start to start thevehicle from a distance, if equipped,you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or theword OFF, or the symbol for on oroff, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑14.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags,and roof‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.



The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑14.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right front passengerseat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture andbody build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) onpage 3‑49 or Securing ChildRestraints (Center Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑49 orSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑47.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child's seating posture andbody build. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow the



system to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importanceof proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how wellthe passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑31 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will enable(turn on) the passenger airbagwhile a child restraint or childoccupant is on the seat. If thepassenger airbag is turned on,the on indicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 forimportant safety information.



The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑11.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbagsystem.



In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing systemfor the right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passenger'sseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26.

If you have any questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑21. See your dealer forservice.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑12 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑12.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.



Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributed

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

across the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑41 for

more information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctly

use and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the child isnot properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughit is turned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑26 for additionalinformation.



{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.



When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle. Thereare two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built intothe vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers on the rear seatback fillerpanel. Be sure to use an anchor onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.



Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑40 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.



Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Push on the depression atthe rear of the cover andswing the lid open toexpose the top tetheranchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position youare using has a fixedheadrest and youare using a singletether, route thetether over the headrestraint.



. If the position youare using has a fixedheadrest and youare using a dualtether, route thetether around thehead restraint.

. If you are using asingle tether in thecenter seatingposition without aheadrest, route thesingle tether overthe seatback.

. If you are using adual tether in thecenter seatingposition without aheadrest, route thedual tether over theseatback.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury oreven death in a crash. To helpmake sure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑41 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑41 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑40.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle safety belt through oraround the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.





4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑41 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition)

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑40.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑26 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑41 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑14.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesConvenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

CupholdersCupholders may be built into thefront center console, front portion ofthe front center seat, and reararmrest of the vehicle.

Sunglasses StorageA storage compartment forsunglasses may be located abovethe rearview mirror. Push on thecover to open the compartment.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seatarmrest, pull the tab on the armrestforward to access it.


4-2 Storage

Rear StorageFor vehicles with a split folding rearseat, there are two storage areasunderneath. Pull the tab(s) locatedby the passenger side safety beltbuckle and the driver side rear seatto access the storage areas. SeeRear Seats (Split Folding) onpage 3‑8 for more information.

Center Console StorageFor vehicles with a front centerconsole storage area, open it bypulling up on the latch located in thefront of the console cover. Theremay be a removable tray inside.

Additional StorageFeatures

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a convenience net,it is located in the rear. Use it tostore small loads as far forward aspossible. The net should not beused to store heavy loads.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-13Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-15MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-23Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-28Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-28Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-30Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-30


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-30Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-31Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-32Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-33Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-34Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-35

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-35

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-40Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The tilt wheel lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the wheel and pull the levertoward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.



Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w (Next): Press to go to the nextradio station stored as a favorite,or the next track if a CD is playing.

c /x (Previous/End): Press togo to the previous radio stationstored as a favorite, go to the nexttrack if a CD is playing, reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar® orBluetooth® systems, press andhold b / g for longer thantwo seconds to interact with thosesystems. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 and Bluetooth onpage 7‑19 for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press to choosebetween the radio (AM, FM, XM),CD, and auxiliary input jack.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the radiovolume.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM, FM,or XM. Press ¨ to go to the nexttrack or chapter while sourced tothe CD.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.



Windshield Wiper/Washer

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to8 ,then release. Several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

? (High Speed): Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑23.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Windshield Washer

Push the paddleL at the top of thelever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers run forseveral sweeps and then either stopor return to the preset speed. Theignition key must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for this towork. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑18.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

When the vehicle is low on washerfluid, the WASHER FLUID LOWADD FLUID displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) for60 seconds. When the ignition isturned off, this message displaysagain for three seconds to remindyou that the fluid level is low.

Until the fluid reservoir is refilled,every time the vehicle is started, theWASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDmessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) for60 seconds. See Washer FluidMessages on page 5‑35.



CompassThis vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

Your dealer will set the correct zonefor your location.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

PressT until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press V to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press3 until the vehicleheading, for example, N forNorth, is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.



It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CBor cell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone in whichthe vehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. PressT until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press V to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehiclein tight circles at less than8 km/h (5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETEfor a few seconds when thecalibration is complete. TheDIC display will then return toPRESS V TO CALIBRATECOMPASS.

Clock

Without Date Display

AM/FM Base Radio with a SingleCD Player

This radio has a H button for settingthe time.

To set the time:

1. Press the H button until the hourbegins flashing on the display.Press H a second time and theminutes begin flashing on thedisplay.



2. To increase or decrease thetime, do one of the followingwhile the hours or minutes areflashing:

. Turn the f knob.



3. Press the H button again untilthe clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayedtime, or wait five seconds untilthe flashing stops and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour, press theH button until 12H or 24H isdisplayed. Once 12H or 24H isdisplayed, turn the f knob to thedesired option to select the setting.Press the H button again to applythe setting, or let the screentime out.

With Date Display

Single CD (MP3) Player

This radio has a H button for settingthe time.

To set the time and date:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the H button and the HR,MIN, MM, DD, and YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year)display.

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the tabs to bechanged.

4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:. Press the pushbutton below

the selected tab.

. Turn the f knob clockwise.

. Press ¨ SEEK.

. Press\ FWD.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Turn the f knobcounter‐clockwise.

. Press © SEEK.

. Presss REV.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date pressthe H button while the radio is on.The date with display times out aftera few seconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press the H button and then thepushbutton located under theforward arrow tab. The time 12Hand 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month,and year) displays.



2. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the desired option.

3. Press the H or MENU buttonagain to apply the selecteddefault, or let the screentime out.

Power OutletsThe vehicle has three 12‐volt outletswhich can be used to plug inelectrical equipment, such as acell phone or MP3 player.

On vehicles with a center console,one outlet is located inside thecenter floor console and two outletsare located at the front of theconsole bin under the instrumentpanel.

On vehicles without a centerconsole, two are located under theclimate controls and another outletfor the rear seat passengers is atthe rear of the center front seat.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain accessory plugs may not becompatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑45.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterThe vehicle may have a cigarettelighter. The cigarette lighter may belocated in the console, if the vehiclehas one; otherwise, it may belocated in the center armrest of thefront seat.



Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

To use the lighter, just push it in allthe way and let go. When it is ready,it will pop back out by itself.

AshtraysThe vehicle may have an ashtray.The ashtray may be located in theconsole, if the vehicle has one;otherwise, it may be located in thecenter armrest of the front seat.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Uplevel Shown, Base and Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in both kilometers per hour(km/h) and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven in eithermiles (used in the United States) orin kilometers (used in Canada).

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the odometer displaysERROR, it probably has beentampered with and the numbersmight not be accurate.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it will beset at zero and a label must be puton the driver door to show the oldmileage reading of the vehicle whenthe new odometer was installed.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

Metric



English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the gas station, the gas pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the fuel tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whenwhile turning a corner orspeeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric



English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. If the gaugepointer moves toward the “H”(United States) or torward theshaded thermostat (Canada), itmeans that the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has beenoperating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑15 for more information.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

For more information seePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14.

This cycle continues several times ifthe front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays on itindicates there is an electricalproblem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑19.

The airbag readiness light flashesfor a few seconds when the engineis started. If the light does not comeon then, have it fixed immediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, an airbag Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message can alsocome on. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑27 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States



Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle from a distance, you maynot see the system check. Then,after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A chargingsystem message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) can alsoappear. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑28for more information. This lightcould indicate that there are



problems with a generator drivebelt, or that there is an electricalproblem. Have it checked rightaway. If the vehicle must be driven ashort distance with the light on, turnoff accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑15 for more information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.



To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑37. The diagnostic

system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑33.

If none of the above havemade the light turn off, your dealercan check the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment. For theinspection, the emission system testequipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.



The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.

If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits needto be working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehiclehas a brake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal can go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑65.



{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady. Thenstart the engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, the vehicle still has brakes, butnot antilock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is alsoon, the vehicle does not haveantilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑18.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23 for all brake relatedDIC messages.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

Press and release the ElectronicStability Control (ESC) OFF buttonto turn off the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), and a messagedisplays in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑31 for more information.



Press and briefly hold the ESC OFFbutton to turn off the ESC system;the ESC OFF light comes on and amessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑31 for more information.

If the TCS/ESC system is off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS/ESCsystem and the indicator lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27, and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 for more information.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC), or the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warninglight comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on orstays on, have the vehicle servicedby the dealer. If the system isworking normally, the indicator lightturns off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, and a messagedisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), have the vehicle

serviced by the dealer. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑31 for more information.

If the light flashes while driving, thismeans that the ESC or the TCS isassisting in controlling the vehicle.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27, and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 for more information.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.



If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑15. The vehicle'sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑15for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑27 for more information.

Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑40 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑42 for moreinformation.



Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash rapidly if the alarmsystem is arming and one or moreof the monitored entry points is notclosed. The light will stay on if thealarm is arming and all entry pointsare closed.



For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑30 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in theDIC display located below thespeedometer in the instrumentpanel cluster. The DIC buttons arelocated on the instrument panel, tothe right of the instrument panelcluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The bottom lineof the DIC shows the shift leverposition indicator. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑22 for moreinformation.



If your vehicle has thesefeatures, the DIC also displays thecompass direction and the outsideair temperature when viewing thetrip and fuel information. Thecompass direction appears on thetop right corner of the DIC display.The outside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottomright corner of the DIC display.If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will bereplaced with dashes. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑35 formore information.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel, to the right of theinstrument panel cluster.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, instantaneous economy,Active Fuel Management™ indicatoron vehicles with this feature, andaverage speed.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readings, andcompass zone and compasscalibration on vehicles with thisfeature.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑35 for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km).



Trip A and Trip B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIPA or TRIP B displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km) since the last resetfor each trip odometer. Both tripodometers can be used at thesame time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing the set/reset button while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) drivensince the ignition was last turned on

and the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL RANGE displays. Thisdisplay shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi) orkilometers (km) the vehicle can bedriven without refueling.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW messagedisplays. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑30 for moreinformation.

Average Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averagemiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per



100 kilometers (L/100 km). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of mpg (L/100 km) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. To reset this display tozero, press and hold the set/resetbutton.

Instantaneous Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until INSTECONOMY displays. This displayshows the current fuel economy at aparticular moment and will changefrequently as driving conditionschange. This display shows theinstantaneous fuel economy in milesper gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlikeaverage economy, this screencannot be reset.

Average Speed

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE SPEED displays. Thisdisplay shows the average speed ofthe vehicle in miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h). Thisaverage is calculated based on the

various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. Toreset the value, press and hold theset/reset button. The display willreturn to zero.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑30. You should change theoil as soon as possible. See EngineOil on page 10‑7. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE yourself after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System on page 10‑10.



Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRICunits.

Tire Pressure

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Pressthe vehicle information button untilthe DIC displays FRONT TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Pressthe vehicle information button againuntil the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you to

add air to a specific tire will appearin the display. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑40 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑33 for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Change Compass Zone

Your vehicle may have this feature.To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see Compass onpage 5‑5.

Calibrate Compass

Your vehicle may have this feature.The compass can be manuallycalibrated. To calibrate the compassthrough the DIC, see Compass onpage 5‑5.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another. Some messages maynot require immediate action, butyou can press the set/reset buttonto acknowledge that you receivedthe message and clear it from theDIC display. Pressing any of theDIC buttons also acknowledges andclears any messages. Somemessages cannot be cleared fromthe DIC display because they aremore urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem. The followingare the possible messages that canbe displayed and some informationabout them.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saversystem starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatthe features are disabled, thismessage is displayed. It means thatthe vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the generator andbattery charging systems. Drivingwith this problem could drain the

battery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical systemchecked by your dealer immediately.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays whenservice is required on the brakesystem. Have the brake systemserviced by your dealer as soon aspossible. The brake system warninglight also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See BrakeSystem Warning Light onpage 5‑18.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thedriver door is not closed properly.Make sure that the door is closedcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

If your vehicle has the remote startfeature, this message displays whenthe hood is not closed properly.Make sure that the hood is closedcompletely. See Hood on page 10‑5.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thedriver side rear door is not closedproperly. Make sure that the door isclosed completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thefront passenger door is not closedproperly. Make sure that the door isclosed completely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thepassenger side rear door is notclosed properly. Make sure that thedoor is closed completely.



TRUNK OPEN

This message displays when thetrunk is not closed completely. Makesure that the trunk is closedcompletely. See Trunk on page 2‑9.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor is automatically turnedoff. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle. If thismessage continues to appear, havethe system repaired by your dealeras soon as possible to avoidcompressor damage.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑15 for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warning

appears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑15 for more information.

This message displays along with acontinuous chime when the enginehas overheated. Stop and turn theengine off immediately to avoidsevere engine damage. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑15.

SERVICE A/C (AirConditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.



Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays whenservice is required for the vehicle.See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation.

Acknowledging the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message willnot reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.That must be done at the OIL LIFEscreen under the vehicle informationmenu. See “Oil Life” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23 and Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑10.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Do

not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 for more information.

This message displays when thevehicle's engine oil pressure is low.The oil pressure light also appearson the instrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5‑22.

Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possiblewhen this message is displayed.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there isno reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. The

performance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when yourvehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fueltank as soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5‑11 and Filling theTank on page 9‑37 for moreinformation.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may be displayed ifthe gas cap is not on, or is not fullytightened. Check the gas cap toensure that it is on properly. SeeFilling the Tank on page 9‑37 formore information.



Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced. To replace the battery, see“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays as areminder to turn off the turn signalif you drive your vehicle for morethan about 1.2 km (0.75 mile) with aturn signal on. See Turn andLane-Change Signals on page 6‑4.

This message displays and a chimesounds only when the ignition is inON/RUN. The message will notdisappear until the turn signal ismanually turned off, or a turn iscompleted.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays if there has beena problem detected with ESC. TheESC/TCS light also appears on the

instrument panel cluster. SeeElectronic Stability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight on page 5‑20 for moreinformation.

If this message turns on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Tryresetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If thismessage still stays on or turns backon again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have thesystem inspected by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), this messagedisplays when the system is notfunctioning properly. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrument



panel cluster. See ElectronicStability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 5‑20. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑27 for more information.Have the TCS serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage may display and the ESC/TCS light on the instrument panelcluster may be on after first drivingthe vehicle and exceeding 30 km/h(19 mph) for 30 seconds. The ESCsystem is not functional until thelight has turned off. See ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFF

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays when the ESC

is turned off manually. SeeElectronic Stability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), thismessage displays when the TCSturns off. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑27 formore information.

This message may display when theignition is in ON/RUN anddisappears after 10 seconds, unlessit is acknowledged or an urgentwarning appears.

Any of the following conditions maycause the TCS to turn off:. The TCS is turned off by

pressing the traction controlbutton. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑27 formore information.

. The battery is low.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), this messagedisplays when the TCS is turned on.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27 for more information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays when thereis a problem with the airbag system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 formore information.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem programmed in the key.



A fault has been detected in thesystem which means that thesystem is disabled and it is notprotecting the vehicle. The vehicleusually restarts; however, you maywant to take the vehicle to yourdealer before turning off the engine.See Immobilizer Operation onpage 2‑12 for more information.

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the contenttheft-deterrent system has detecteda break-in attempt while you wereaway from your vehicle. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11 for more information.

Service Vehicle Messages

ERROR

This message displays whileviewing the odometer or tripodometers if there is a problem withthe instrument panel cluster. Seeyour dealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when aproblem is detected with the powersteering system. When thismessage is displayed, you maynotice that the effort required tosteer the vehicle increases or feelsheavier, but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer immediately.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays if the startingof the engine is disabled due to theelectronic throttle control system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

This message only appears whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN, and willnot disappear until the problem isresolved.

This message cannot beacknowledged.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑21. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑42 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.



TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑45,Tire Rotation on page 10‑45, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑41, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑40 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low. This messagealso displays LEFT FRT (left front),

RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR(left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear)to indicate the location of the lowtire. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑21. Youcan receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button. If a tirepressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and setto those shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑33, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑40. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when thetransmission fluid in your vehicle istoo hot. Stop the vehicle and allow itto idle until it cools down. If thewarning message continues todisplay, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.



Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer reservoir assoon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thewindshield washer reservoir. Also,see Washer Fluid on page 10‑18 formore information.

VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle has customizationcapabilities that allow you toprogram certain features to onepreferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customizationbutton to enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).



Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access

the settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See“Programmable Automatic Door

Unlock” under Automatic DoorLocks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park) .

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.



ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if any ofthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There willbe no feedback when you press thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS ON (default):The exterior lamps will flash whenyou press the lock button on theRKE transmitter, and the horn willsound when the lock button ispressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for this

feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.



The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.



Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit theFEATURE SETTINGS menu.

Press the customization button untilFEATURE SETTINGS PRESS VTO EXIT appears in the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of theFEATURE SETTINGS menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This vehicle may have the UniversalHome Remote System.



This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use this system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person available to assist inprogramming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remotecontrol transmitter for use in othervehicles, as well as for futureprogramming. Only the originalremote control transmitter is neededfor Fixed Code programming. Theprogrammed buttons should be

erased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons” inthis section.

Park the vehicle outside of thegarage when programming a garagedoor. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage dooror gate that is being programmed.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers sold after1996 are Rolling Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressthe two outside buttons at thesame time for one totwo seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.



2. In the garage, locate thegarage door opener receiver(motor-head unit). Locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button. It canusually be found where thehanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unitand may be a colored button.Press this button. After pressingthis button, complete thefollowing steps in less than30 seconds.

3. Immediately return to thevehicle. Press and hold theUniversal Home Remote button

that will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light,above the selected button,should slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second,release the button when thegarage door moves. Theindicator light will blink rapidlyuntil programming is complete.

5. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Rolling Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 5, choosing adifferent function button in Step 3than what was used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work,the garage door opener is probablya Fixed Code unit. Follow theProgramming instructions that followfor a Fixed Code garage dooropener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldbefore 1996 are Fixed Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.



To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage dooropener is a Fixed Code unit,remove the battery cover on thehand held transmitter suppliedby the manufacturer of thegarage door opener motor.If there are a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above, thegarage door opener is a FixedCode unit. If you do not see arow of dip switches, returnto the previous section forProgramming Universal HomeRemote – Rolling Code.

Your hand-held transmitter canhave between 8 to 12 dipswitches depending on thebrand of transmitter.

The garage door opener receiver(motor head unit) could alsohave a row of dip switches thatcan be used when programmingthe Universal Home Remote.If the total number of switcheson the motor head andhand-held transmitter is different,or if the dip switch settings aredifferent, use the dip switchsettings on the motor head unitto program the Universal HomeRemote. The motor head dipswitch settings can also be usedwhen the original hand heldtransmitter is not available.

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Three Positions

The panel of switches might notappear exactly as they do in theexamples above, but theyshould be similar.



The switch positions on thehand-held transmitter could belabeled, as follows:. A switch in the up position

could be labeled as “Up,”“+,” or “On.”

. A switch in the downposition could be labeled as“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

. A switch in the middleposition could be labeled as“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

2. Write down the 8 to 12 switchsettings from left to right asfollows:. When a switch is in the up

position, write “Left.”. When a switch is in the

down position, write “Right.”

. If a switch is set betweenthe up and down position,write “Middle.”

The switch settings writtendown in Step 2 will nowbecome the button strokesto be entered into theUniversal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter theswitch settings written downin Step 2, in order from leftto right, into the UniversalHome Remote, whencompleting Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, firstfirmly press all three buttons atthe same time for aboutthree seconds. Release thebuttons to put the UniversalHome Remote intoprogramming mode.

A. Left Button("Up," "+," or "On.")

B. Middle Button("Middle," "0," or "Neutral.")

C. Right Button("Down," "-," or "Off.")



4. The indicator lights will blinkslowly. Enter each switchsetting from Step 2 into yourvehicle's Universal HomeRemote. You will have two andone-half minutes to completeStep 4. Now press one button onthe Universal Home Remote foreach switch setting as follows:. If you wrote “Left,” press

the left button in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Right,” pressthe right button in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Middle,” pressthe middle button in thevehicle.

5. After entering all of the switchpositions, again, firmly press andrelease all three buttons at thesame time. The indicator lightswill turn on.

6. Press and hold the button thatwill be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator lightabove the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

8. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Fixed Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 8, choosing adifferent button in Step 6 than whatwas used for the garage dooropener.



Universal Remote SystemOperationPress and hold the appropriatebutton for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming UniversalHome Remote Buttons

Any of the three buttons can bereprogrammed by repeating theinstructions.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Code orFixed Code on the Universal HomeRemote device:

1. Press and hold the 2 outsidebuttons at the same time forapproximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, locateddirectly above the buttons, beginto blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin toblink, release both buttons. Thecodes from all buttons will beerased.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 13‑3.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Fog Lamps (If Equipped)


6-2 Lighting

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

O (Off): Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on. For vehicles first soldin Canada, the off position onlyworks when the vehicle is shiftedinto the P (Park) position.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps

. License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below. Whenthe headlamps are turned on whilethe vehicle is on, the headlamps willturn off automatically 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off. Whenthe headlamps are turned on whilethe vehicle is off, the headlampswill stay on for 10 minutes beforeautomatically turning off to preventthe battery from being drained. Turnthe headlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped):Turns on the fog lamps.

See Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, push the turnsignal/multifunction lever awayfrom you.

This instrument panel clusterlight3 comes on if the high‐beamlamps are turned on while theignition is in ON/RUN.

To change the headlamps from highbeam to low beam, pull the turnsignal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or inthe low‐beam position, pull theturn signal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.


Lighting 6-3

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/RUN

position.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, the regularheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps are not on. Theinstrument panel and cluster arealso not on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel because itworks with the DRL.

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flashers letyou warn others that you have aproblem.

The hazard warning flasher buttonis located on top of the steeringcolumn.

| : Press to make the front andrear turn signal lamps flash on andoff. Press the button again to turnthe flashers off.


6-4 Lighting

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑29.

Turn Signal On Chime

If either one of the turn signals areleft on and the vehicle has beendriven more than 1.2 km (0.75 mile),a chime will sound.

Fog Lamps

# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles withfog lamps, the button is located onthe exterior lamps control. Theexterior lamps control is located onthe instrument panel to the left ofthe steering column.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUNposition for the fog lamps tocome on.


Lighting 6-5

Press # to turn the fog lamps on oroff. A light will come on in theinstrument panel cluster.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps alsogo off.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): This knob is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel. Push the knob inall the way until it extends out andthen turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights. Push the knob back inwhen finished.

Courtesy LampsWhen a door is opened, thecourtesy lamps automatically comeon. They make it easy for you toenter and leave your vehicle. Youcan also manually turn these lampson by fully turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwise.

The reading lamps, located on therearview mirror, can be turned on oroff independent of the automaticcourtesy lamps, when the doors areclosed.


6-6 Lighting

Dome Lamps

The center mounted dome lampoverhead comes on when a door isopened. This lamp can also beturned on by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwise.

Reading Lamps

The vehicle has reading lamps thatalso act as the dome lamp. Pressthe button near each lamp to turnthem on and off.

Map Lamps

The vehicle has map lamps on therearview mirror. Press the buttonnear each lamp on the mirror to turnthe map lamps on and off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingFor vehicles with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a settime whenever the unlock symbol ispressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

If a door is opened, the lamps stayon while it is open and then turn offautomatically about 20 secondsafter the door is closed. If the unlocksymbol is pressed and no door isopened, the lamps turn off afterabout 20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps do not turn offat the end of the delay time.Instead, they slowly dim and thengo out. The delay time is canceled ifthe ignition key is turned to ON/RUNor the power door lock switch ispressed. The lamps will dimright away.


Lighting 6-7

When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which means thecourtesy lamps will not come onunless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminatesthe interior for a period of time afterall the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayedentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one of thefollowing occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The doors are locked.. An illumination period of about

25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period is canceled andthe interior lamps remain on.

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interiorfor a period of time after the key isremoved from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When the keyis removed, interior illuminationactivates and remains on until oneof the following occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The power door locks are

activated.. An illumination period of

20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain onbecause a door is open.

Parade DimmingParade mode automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrument paneldisplays during the daylight whilethe headlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightlyto prevent overcharging.


6-8 Lighting

If the vehicle has a voltmeter gaugeor a voltage display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), you maysee the voltage move up or down.This is normal. If there is a problem,an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE. If this messagesdisplays, it is recommended that thedriver reduce the electrical loads asmuch as possible. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, ifthe interior courtesy lamps,reading/map lamps, visorvanity lamps, or trunk lamp areaccidentally left on. If any of theselamps are left on, they automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes, if theignition is off. The lamps will notcome back on again until oneof the following occurs:. The ignition is turned on.. The exterior lamps control is

turned off, then on again.

The headlamps will time out after10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on with the ignition on or off.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑18 for moreinformation.


7-2 Infotainment System

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

Radio with CD (Base)



Radio with CD (MP3)

The vehicle has one of these radiosas its infotainment system.

Softkeys

The Radio with CD (MP3) has sixsoftkeys located below the radiodisplay. Softkeys are used to control

functions that appear on the radiodisplay as tabs directly above thesoftkeys.

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

4 (Information): Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): Radios with the SpeedCompensated Volume (SCV) featureautomatically adjust the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM tab on the radiodisplay.



4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation.The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)Radio with CD

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.



EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)Radio with CD (MP3)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust the bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired tonecontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.



If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey positioned underthe BASS, MID, or TREB tab formore than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds.



EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treblereturns the EQ to the manual bassand treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD

To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the` button or press

the f knob until the speakercontrol label displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.



Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) Radio withCD (MP3)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.



To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: Displays if theradio is no longer calibratedproperly for the vehicle. The vehiclemust be returned to your dealer forservice.

Loc or Locked: Displays when theTheftLock® system has activated.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

4 (Information) (RDS Features):For vehicles with RDS features,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist information

displays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Auto Text (RDS Features): Ifadditional information is availablefor the current song being played,Auto Text will automatically page/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display. Bydefault, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONor OFF tab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song titleor artist information is longer thanwhat can be displayed, the extrainformation will page everythree seconds when Auto Text isactivated.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM™ (ifequipped) on the Radio with CD(Base). Press to choose betweenFM, AM, XM (if equipped) on theRadio with CD (MP3).

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK: Press to seek or scanstations with a strong signal in theselected band.. To seek stations, press and

release © SEEK to go to theprevious station and stay there.

. To scan stations, press and hold© SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press © SEEK again tostop scanning.

. To scan preset stations inthe selected band, press andhold © SEEK for four seconds



until a double beep sounds. Theradio goes to a stored preset,plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next stored preset.Press © SEEK again to stopscanning preset stations.

¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scanstations with a strong signal in theselected band.. To seek stations, press and

release ¨ SEEK to go to thenext station and stay there.

. To scan stations, press and hold¨ SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press ¨ SEEK again tostop scanning.

. To scan preset stations inthe selected band, press andhold ¨ SEEK for four secondsuntil a double beep sounds. Theradio goes to a stored preset,plays for a few seconds, then

goes to the next stored preset.Press ¨ SEEK again to stopscanning preset stations.

Storing Radio Stations

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked. See Defensive Driving onpage 9‑3. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Radios that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites, up to36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the 6 softkeys belowthe radio station frequency tabs andby using the FAV button. Press theFAV button to go through up to6 pages of favorites, each having6 favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM, FM,or XM, if equipped, stations.

Radios that do not have a FAVbutton store radio stations aspresets, up to 18 stations (6 FM1,

6 FM2, and 6 AM), can beprogrammed on the 6 numberedpushbuttons.

Storing a Radio Station as aPreset, Radio with CD (Base)

Radios that have numberedpushbuttons store radio stations aspresets.

Up to 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2,and 6 AM), can be programmed onthe six numbered buttons.

To store preset stations:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the6 numbered pushbuttons for3 seconds until a beep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to storeadditional radio stations.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite, Radio with CD (MP3)

Radios that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.



2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the6 softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. If XMService needs to be reactivated, theradio will display “No SubscriptionPlease Renew” on channel XM1.For more information, contact XMat www.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

4 (Information) (XM Satellite RadioService): For vehicles with XM,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentXM channel. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of the

display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Auto Text (Satellite RadioService): If additional information isavailable for the current song beingplayed, Auto Text will automaticallypage/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display. Bydefault, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONor OFF tab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song titleor artist information is longer thanwhat can be displayed, the extrainformation will page everythree seconds when Auto Text isactivated.



Finding an XM Channel

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectan XM channel.

© SEEK: Press to go to theprevious XM channel.. To scan stations, press and hold

© SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a cahnnel, plays for afew seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press © SEEKagain to stop scanning.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nextXM channel.. To scan stations, press and hold

¨ SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press ¨ SEEK again tostop scanning.

s REV: Press to go to theprevious XM category.

\ FWD: Press to go to the nextXM category.

Finding a Category (CAT)Channel

To find XM channels in a category:

1. Press the CAT button to displaythe category tabs. Continuepressing the CAT button until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressing the\ FWD or thes REVbutton.

2. Press either of the two softkeysbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station in that category.

To go to the previous or next XMstation in the selected category,do one of the following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the softkey below theright or left arrows in thecategory tab.

. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.

3. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orBAND button to display thefavorites again.

Adding and Removing Categories

Categories cannot be added orremoved while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

To add or remove a category:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe XM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory you want to add orremove.

4. Press the softkey located underthe Add or Remove tab.

To restore all removedcategories, press the softkeyunder the Restore All tab.



5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Storing XM Channels

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked. See Defensive Driving onpage 9‑3. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Up to 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using the6 softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theFAV button. Press the FAV button togo through up to 6 pages offavorites, each having 6 favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM,if equipped, stations.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to an XM channel.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the6 softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.



Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver or antennacould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there is



interference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some staticcan occur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space betweenthe grid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rear



window defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused toyour backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system (ifequipped) may be affected if thesunroof is open.

Audio Players

CD PlayerSome CD players can play MP3CD-R or CD-RW discs. See “MP3”later in this section for moreinformation.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single discs with anadapter ring.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a disc. It couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top ofthe disc if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners. Theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,

load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

Store a disc in its original case or aprotective case and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. If thebottom of a disc is damaged it maynot play properly or at all. Do nottouch the bottom of a disc whilehandling it, pick it up by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is dirty, takea soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.



Inserting a Disc

Insert the disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the disc begins playing.

Use an adapter ring when playingthe smaller 8 cm (3 in) discs.Smaller discs with the adapter ringare loaded the same way as afull-size disc.

Ejecting a Disc

Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc.If the disc is not removed afterseveral seconds, the CD playerautomatically pulls the disc back in.

Playing a CD

When a CD is inserted into theplayer, the CD symbol displays. Aseach new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwhen a CD is in the player, the CDstays in the player. If the ignition orradio is turned on when a CD is in

the player, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

Buttons and Knobs

The buttons and knobs on the radiocontrol the following features.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD.

© SEEK: Press to go to the startof the current track, if more than10 seconds have played. Pressand hold or press multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughthe tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through the tracks onthe CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly within atrack. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thetrack displays. Release to resumeplaying the track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume and theelapsed time of the track displays.Release to resume playing thetrack.

4 (Information): Press to displayavailable additional informationabout the current track.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the CD player.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD while listening to theradio or a portable audio device.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, NoAux Input Device Found maydisplay.



Softkeys

The six softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control functionsthat display as tabs.

The softkeys below the radio displaycontrol the following features.

RDM (Random): Tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey below theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

MP3 Supported Files

The Radio with CD (MP3) has thecapability of playing an MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

The radio can also play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. When a disc

contains both types of audio, the CDplayer reads all MP3 files first, thenthe uncompressed CD audio files.

Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 50 playlists.. Up to 255 files.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3 or .cda file

extension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a disc display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

File Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe file extension as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or 4 pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename is not displayed.

Playlists

Discs that have playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,there is no playlist editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.



Playing an MP3

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When playback starts from a newfolder, the new track name displaysunless folder mode has beenchosen as the default display, thenthe new folder name displays.

Buttons and Knobs

The buttons and knobs on the radiocontrol the following features.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 fileson the disc.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the trackdisplays. Releases REV toresume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thetrack displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing.

4 (Information): Press to displayavailable additional informationabout the current track.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile an MP3 disc is playing. TheMP3 disc remains inside the CDplayer.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay an MP3 disc while listening tothe radio or a portable audio device.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, NoAux Input Device Found maydisplay.



Softkeys

The six softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control functionsthat display as tabs.

The softkeys below the radio displaycontrol the following features.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

RDM (Random): MP3 files can belistened to on a CD in random,rather than sequential order. To userandom:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays to play songs fromthe current CD in random order.

2. Press the same softkey again toturn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to have the filesplayed in order by artist or album.The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the desired artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the disc andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.



CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error messagedisplays and/or the disc comes out,it could be for one of the followingreasons:. The CD player is very hot. When

the temperature returns tonormal, the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. A problem occurred whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the disc is not playing correctly forany other reason, try a knowngood disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

The radio system has an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is notan audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. However, anexternal audio device such as aniPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD changer, or cassette tape playercan be connected to the auxiliaryinput jack as another source foraudio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.While a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn toincrease or decrease the volume ofthe portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might need tobe made from the portable device.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing until it is stoppedor turned off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD while a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input DeviceFound may display.



Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth‐capable cell phone with aHands‐Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.



When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (End): Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.



Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system responds

with “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.



To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”




Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.



Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.



Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Climate Control SystemsThis vehicle may have a dual or single climate control system. The heating,cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation can be controlled with this system.For vehicles with heated seats, see Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7.

Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Outside Air

C. Recirculation

D. Air Delivery Mode Control

E. Air Conditioning

F. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

G. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

H. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

Single Zone

A. Fan Control

B. Outside Air

C. Temperature Control

D. Recirculation

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

F. Air Conditioning

G. Rear Window Defogger

Temperature Control: For dualzone, turn the thumbwheels up ordown to increase or decrease thetemperature on the driver or thepassenger side of the vehicle. Forsingle zone, turn the knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Positioningthe knob between two modes canselect a combination of thosemodes.

If the airflow seems low when thefan is at the highest setting, thepassenger compartment air filtermay need to be replaced. There willbe some airflow noticeable from thevarious outlets when driving, evenwith the fan in the off position. Formore information, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 8‑5and Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflowinside the vehicle.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.



6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield and sidewindow outlets. In this mode, thesystem automatically selectsoutside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindshield of fog or moisture. Air isdirected equally to the windshieldand the floor outlets. When defog isselected, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is below4°C (40°F).

0 (Defrost): This mode clearsthe windshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield with some air to the sidewindow vents and the floor vents.When defrost is selected, thesystem automatically forcesoutside air into the vehicle. Theair conditioning compressor willrun automatically in this setting,unless the outside temperature isbelow 4°C (40°F).

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning systemon or off. An indicator light comeson to show that it is on. The airconditioning can be selected in anymode as long as the fan is on andthe outside temperature is abovefreezing. A flashing indicator lightindicates that the air conditioningcompressor is currently notavailable.

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, dothe following:

1. Select theH mode.

2. Press the# button.

3. Select the coolest temperaturefor both zones.

4. Select the highest9 speed.

5. When the coolest temperature isselected in the A/C mode, thesystem automatically goes intothe recirculation mode toimprove cooling.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening,after the air inside the vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculationmode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water may dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

% (Outside Air): Press to turnon outside air. An indicator lightcomes on to show that it is on.Outside air will circulate throughoutthe vehicle.

/ (Recirculation): Press toturn on the recirculation mode. Anindicator light comes on to showthat it is on.



This mode helps to quickly heat orcool the air inside the vehicle oncethe temperature inside the vehicle isequal to or better than the outsidetemperature. It can be used toprevent outside air and odorsfrom entering the vehicle. Therecirculation mode is not available inoutside air, floor, defog, or defrostmodes. If the button is selectedwhile in these modes, the indicatorflashes three times.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

1 (Rear Window Defogger): Therear window defogger turns offautomatically after it has beenactivated for 10 minutes. It can beturned off manually, by pressing thebutton again or by turning theignition to the LOCK/OFF position.

The rear window defogger can beturned on again for additionalwindow clearing. The length ofdefogger operation will increase ifthe vehicle is being driven.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, the mirrors heat tohelp clear fog or frost from thesurface of the mirror when the rearwindow defog button is pressed.See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Air VentsUse the thumbwheel located belowor to the side of the outlet, tochange the direction of the air flow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside thevehicle more effectively.



. If the airflow seems low whenthe fan is at the highest setting,the passenger compartment airfilter, if equipped, may need toreplaced. For more information,see Passenger Compartment AirFilter on page 8‑5 andMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

. If fogging reoccurs while in ventor bi-level modes with mildtemperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the airconditioner to reducewindshield fogging.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe vehicle has a passengercompartment particulate air filter.It is located in the enginecompartment, below the air inletgrille on the passenger side.

The filter traps most of the pollenfrom air entering the climate controlsystem. It needs to be changedperiodically to ensure systemperformance. For information onhow often to change the passengercompartment air filter, seeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

To change the passengercompartment air filter:

1. Turn off the ignition when thewindshield wipers are in the upposition.

2. Raise the vehicle hood.

3. Pull back the hood weatherstripfrom the passenger side of thevehicle halfway to center.

4. Remove the air inlet grilleretainers.



5. Lift the air inlet grille anddisconnect the washer hose atthe quick-connect.

6. Remove the air inlet grille.

7. Remove the water deflectorplate.

8. Remove the old passengercompartment air filter.

9. Reverse the steps to install thenew air filter.

For best climate control systemperformance, reinstall the air filter.

For the type of filter to use, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑12.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-33Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-34Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-36Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones orother electronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.



Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑10.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious— or evenfatal— collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10‑17.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.



2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.



Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑33.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.



Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.



Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑26 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

See Tire Chains on page 10‑52.



Rocking the Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. See Towingthe Vehicle on page 10‑65.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Vehicle Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The Tire andLoading Information label liststhe number of occupant seating



positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds. Thevehicle capacity weightincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory‐installed options.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also liststhe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflation,see Tires on page 10‑33 andTire Pressure on page 10‑40.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle, see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step³4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity foryour vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer,see Trailer Towing on page 9‑42for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.



Example 1

A. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)



Refer to your vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's maximum vehiclecapacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weightof the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's maximum vehiclecapacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is found on the rear edgeof the driver door.

The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel,and cargo.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If there is a heavy load, it shouldbe spread out.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else areput inside the vehicle, they willgo as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.



{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast orslow, for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.



. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑42 for the trailertowing capabilities of yourvehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑18

This position locks the ignition andsteering wheel. It also locks thetransmission. This is the onlyposition in which the ignition keycan be inserted or removed.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.



4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑27

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom left to right while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is theposition in which you can operatethe radio and windshield wipers

while the engine is off. To use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the keyclockwise.

C (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. This positioncan also be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning chime will sound and theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay DRIVER DOOR OPENwhen the driver door is opened, theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF, and the key is in theignition. See Door Ajar Messageson page 5‑28 for more information.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Do



not race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer‐ControlledCranking System is disabledto prevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When thishappens, hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START

for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm‐up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at least fourhours before starting.

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord isattached to the diagonal braceon the driver side of the enginecompartment.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts,and prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows

The radio will work when the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.Once the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF the radio willcontinue to work 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened. Thepower windows will continue to workfor up to 10 minutes or until anydoor is opened.



Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑39.

Steering Column Shift Lever

If the vehicle has a steering columnshift lever, use this procedure toshift the vehicle into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pulling the shift lever towardyou and moving it up as far as itwill go.

3. With your foot still holding thebrake pedal down, set theparking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑27 for moreinformation.

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Console Shift Lever

If the vehicle is equipped with aconsole shift lever, use thisprocedure to shift the vehicle intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle.

3. While keeping the brake pedalapplied, set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 9‑27for more information.

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.



If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure yourvehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑27 for more information.

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park” inthis section.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of Park

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock

The vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shift lockrelease is designed to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock is always functionalexcept in the case of a anuncharged or low voltage (lessthan 9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑62.

Console Shift

If the console shift lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park):

1. Apply and maintain the regularbrakes.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNposition. See Ignition Positionson page 9‑15 for moreinformation.

3. Let up on the shift lever andmake sure the shift lever ispushed all the way into P (Park).

4. Press the shift lever button.

5. Then, move the shift into thedesired gear.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Column Shift

If the column shift lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park):

1. Apply and maintain the regularbrakes.



2. Turn the ignition key to theON/RUN position. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑15 for moreinformation.

3. Shift out of the P (Park) positionto the N (Neutral) position.

4. Move the vehicle to a safelocation.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑19.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑39.

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats, or on thesteering column. Gear positions areindicated on the instrument cluster.



P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑39.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brake before shifting from

P (Park) when the ignition key is inON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever, then push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑20.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.



N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You candrive in L (Low) when you aredriving less than 56 km/h (35mph)and D (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see "Skidding" underLoss of Control on page 9‑5.

L (Low): This position gives youaccess to gear ranges. Thisprovides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than D (Drive).You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. See thefollowing text on Manual Mode.



Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you tochoose the top-gear limit of thetransmission, which can helpcontrol the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.

The vehicle has an electronicshift position indicator within theinstrument cluster. When using theERS mode a number will displaynext to the L, indicating the currentrange that has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the + (Plus) or − (Minus)button located on the left side ofthe steering wheel, to increaseor decrease the gear rangeavailable.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range.

The highest gear available for thispre-determined range is displayednext to the L in the DIC. Thenumber displayed in the DIC is thehighest gear that the transmissionwill be allowed to operate in. Allgears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to theL, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gearsare automatically shifted by thevehicle. The transmission will notshift into 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus)button is used or you shift back intoD (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lower gearrange if the engine speed istoo high.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑19.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,

there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

The parking brake is located to theleft of the brake pedal, near thedriver door.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down, then push downthe parking brake pedal.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down and push theparking brake pedal. When you liftyour foot off the parking brakepedal, the pedal will follow it to thereleased position.

A warning chime will sound and abrake warning light located on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon, if the parking brake is set, theignition is on, and the vehicle speedis greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer andparking on any hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑39.

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a TractionControl System (TCS) that limitswheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it sensesthat one or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, thesystem reduces engine power andmay also upshift the transmissionand apply the front brakes to limitwheel spin.

This light will flash when the TCS islimiting wheel spin.



The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise control will automaticallydisengage. Cruise control may bereengaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑30.

The TCS operates in alltransmission shift lever positions.But the system can upshift thetransmission only as high as theshift lever position chosen, so usethe lower gears only whennecessary. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑22.

When the system is on, this warninglight comes on and stays on if thereis a problem.

A SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLmessage also appears on the DIC.When this warning light is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeRide Control System Messages onpage 5‑31 for more information.

To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, TCSshould always be left on. But thesystem can be turned off if needed.Turn the system off if the vehiclegets stuck in sand, mud, or snowand rocking the vehicle is required.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9‑9 for more information.

To turn the system on or off, pressthe ESC OFF button located on theinstrument panel.

When the system is turned off,the TRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage appears on the DIC. If thetraction control system is limitingwheel spin when the button ispressed to turn the system off,the TRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage will appear on the DIC andthe system will turn off right away.

Press the ESC OFF button again toturn the system back on. TheTRACTION CONTROL ONmessage will appear in the DIC.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3 for more information.



Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)Your vehicle may have an ElectronicStability Control (ESC) systemwhich combines antilock brake,traction, and stability controlsystems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start your vehicleand begin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.You may hear or feel the systemworking. This is normal and doesnot mean there is a problem withyour vehicle. The system shouldinitialize before the vehicle reaches32 km/h (20 mph).

If the system fails to turn on oractivate due to a fault, the ESC/TCSlight will be on solid, and theSERVICE STABILITRAK messagewill be displayed. If the system failsto turn on or activate due to it notinitializing, the DIC will displaySTABILITRAK INITIALIZING.

For more information, see RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑31.

This light will flash on the instrumentpanel cluster when the ESC systemis both on and activated.

You may also feel or hear thesystem working; this is normal.

When the light is on solid and theSERVICE STABILITRAK messageis displayed, the system will notassist the driver in maintainingdirectional control of the vehicle.Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeRide Control System Messages onpage 5‑31.

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system is automaticallyenabled whenever you start your

vehicle. To assist the driverwith vehicle directional control,especially in slippery roadconditions, you should alwaysleave the system on. But, you canturn ESC off if you ever need to.

If the vehicle is in cruise controlwhen the system begins to assistthe driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle, the ESC/TCSlight will flash and the cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Whenroad conditions allow you to usecruise again, you may re-engagethe cruise control. See CruiseControl on page 9‑30.

The ESC OFF button is located onthe instrument panel.



The traction control system can beturned off or back on by pressingthe ESC OFF button. To disableboth traction control and ESC, pressand hold the button briefly.

When the ESC system is turned off,the TRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage will appear, theSTABILITRAK OFF message willappear, and the ESC OFF light willbe on solid to warn the driver thatboth traction control and ESC aredisabled.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,

and you want to “rock” your vehicleto attempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle Is Stuckon page 9‑9.

ESC may also turn off automaticallyif it determines that a problem existswith the system. The SERVICESTABILITRAK message and theESC/TCS light will be on solid towarn the driver that ESC is disabledand requires service. If the problemdoes not clear after restarting thevehicle, you should see your dealerfor service. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑31 formore information.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect your vehicle performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS) and thecruise control is on, TCS will beginto limit wheel spin and the cruise



control automatically turns off . SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑27. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, thecruise control can be turnedback on.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

T (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicator is litwhen cruise control is on.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET–: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed. SeeInstrument Cluster on page 5‑10.

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. Press theT button to turn thecruise system on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release the SET–button located on the steeringwheel.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If cruise control is set at a desiredspeed and then the brakes areapplied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, press the +RESbutton on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previouslyselected speed and stays there.



Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press the+RES button. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button briefly.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed. When youtake your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to the cruisespeed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain yourspeed. When going downhill, youmight have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep your speeddown. If the brakes are applied thecruise control will turn off.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ button on thesteering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,press theT button on thesteering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased from memory bypressingT or if the ignition isturned off.



FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑36. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑33.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.



Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑35 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑16. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.



Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.



Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑33.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

The starting characteristics of E85fuel make it unsuitable for use whentemperatures fall below −18°C(0°F). In the range of −18°C (0°F) to0°C (32°F), it may take more time tostart the engine.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑37.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle. If thevehicle has E85 fuel capability, thefuel cap will be yellow and state thatE85 or gasoline can be used. SeeFuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑36.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap on the hook on the inside ofthe fuel door.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑67.

When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if



the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑16.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑30 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.

The wrong type of fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑16.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑65. For information ontowing the vehicle behind another

vehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑66.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many different laws,

including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering.Make sure the rig will be legal,not only where you live but alsowhere you will be driving.A good source for thisinformation can be state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven. Theengine, transmission or otherparts could be damaged. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer. Do notdrive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or nomore than 90 km/h (55 mph), tosave wear on the vehicle's parts.

. Do not tow a trailer when theoutside temperature is above38°C (100°F).

Three important considerationshave to do with weight:. the weight of the trailer,. the weight of the trailer tongue. and the total weight on the

vehicle's tires.



Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get to knowthe rig before setting out for theopen road. Get acquainted with thefeel of handling and braking with theadded weight of the trailer. Andalways keep in mind that the vehicleyou are driving is now longer andnot as responsive as the vehicle isby itself.

Before starting, check all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thevehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes areworking. This checks the electricalconnection at the same time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.



When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing thesignal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Notice: Do not tow on steepcontinuous grades exceeding9.6 km (6 miles). Extended,higher than normal engine andtransmission temperatures mayresult and damage the vehicle.Frequent stops are very importantto allow the engine andtransmission to cool.

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle's speed toaround 70 km/h (45 mph) to reducethe possibility of the engine and thetransmission overheating. If theengine does overheat, see EngineOverheating on page 10‑15.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftthe transmission into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. start the engine,. shift into a gear, and. release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.



Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, belts,cooling system and brake system.It is a good idea to inspect thesebefore and during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑15.

Changing a Tire When TrailerTowing

If the vehicle gets a flat tire whiletowing a trailer, be sure to securethe trailer and disconnect it from thevehicle before changing the tire.

Trailer Towing

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehiclemay also be damaged; theresulting repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it isequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. To identify thetrailering capacity of the vehicle,read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in thissection. Trailering is different thanjust driving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.



Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for the safety of the driverand the passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transmission, axles,wheel assemblies and tires areforced to work harder against thedrag of the added weight. Theengine is required to operate atrelatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat.The trailer also adds considerably towind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.



Using a weight-carrying hitch, thetrailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 to15 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Certification/Tire label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.Make sure not to go over the GVWlimit for the vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded. Here are some rules tofollow:. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal theholes later when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑21 in the Index for moreinformation.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Follow themanufacturer's recommendationfor attaching safety chains and donot attach them to the bumper.



Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap into thevehicle's hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

Does your trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso you will be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑31 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑31.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-15

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-17Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-21Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-22

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-27

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-28Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-34Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46


10-2 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-51Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-61

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-66Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑31.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑11.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑31.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑13.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the interior hood releasehandle with this symbol on it.It is located to the left of theparking brake pedal. 2. Then go to the front of the

vehicle and release thesecondary hood latch, locatednear the center of the hood front,by pushing the latch to the right.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenpull the hood down and close itfirmly.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑18.

B. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑29.

C. Battery on page 10‑21.

D. Power Steering Reservoir andCap. See Power Steering Fluidon page 10‑17.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑7.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑7.

G. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView. See Cooling System onpage 10‑12.

H. Transmission Fluid Cap. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluidon page 10‑10.

I. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 10‑18.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑11.

K. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑13.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑10.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above the

operating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engineoils with the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved tothe dexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑30.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter must

be changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the system:

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Contact your dealer for additionalinformation or the procedure can befound in the service manual. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑11

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and besure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for more informationon location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each (80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Unfasten the clips on top of theengine air cleaner/filter housing.

2. Lift the filter cover housing awayfrom the engine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

5. Lower the filter cover housingtoward the engine.


10-12 Vehicle Care

6. Fasten the clips on the top of thehousing to lock the cover inplace.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

When it is safe to lift the hood:

A. Engine Cooling Fans (Outof View)

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant mixture. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑11and Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑15.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Depending onthe engine, use a 50/50 mixtureof deionized water or clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of deionizedwater or clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant. If using thismixture, nothing else needs to beadded.

This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much deionized water orclean, drinkable water in themixture can freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core, andother parts.

Never dispose of engine coolantby putting it in the trash, pouring iton the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the markpointed to, add a 50/50 mixture ofdeionized water or clean drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.


Vehicle Care 10-15

The coolant surge tank pressurecap can be removed when thecooling system, including the surgetank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.

1. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise. If a hiss isheard, wait for that to stop.A hiss means there is still somepressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the markpointed to on the front of thecoolant surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank capoff, start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosestarts getting hot. Watch out forthe engine cooling fans. By thistime, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may belower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to thecoolant surge tank until the levelreaches the mark pointed to onthe front of the coolantsurge tank.

5. Replace the cap. Be sure thecap is hand–tight and fullyseated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperaturegauge and a engine coolanttemperature warning light on theinstrument panel cluster that

indicate an overheated enginecondition. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑12and Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 5‑20 formore information.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fansshould be running. If not, do notcontinue to run the engine and havethe vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.


10-16 Vehicle Care

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑16 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem might not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning displays withno sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anengine coolant temperature warninglight no longer displays, the vehiclecan be driven. Continue to drive thevehicle slowly for about 10 minutes.Keep a safe vehicle distance fromthe vehicle in front. If the warningdoes not come back on, continue todrive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Modeon page 10‑16.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be drivento a safe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, there is significant loss inpower and engine performance.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on theinstrument panel, to indicate thevehicle has entered overheatedengine protection operating mode.


Vehicle Care 10-17

The temperature gauge alsoindicates an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended km (miles)and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode shouldbe avoided.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for information on thelocation of the power steering fluidreservoir.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system oran unusual noise is heard. A fluid

loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Notice: Extremely small amountsof contamination can causesteering system damage andcause it to not work properly. Donot allow contaminants to contactthe fluid side of the reservoir cap/dipstick or to enter the reservoir.

Check the level after the vehicle hasbeen driven for at least 20 minutesso the fluid is warm.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and pull itstraight up.

4. Wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

When the engine is hot, the levelshould be at the hot MAX level.When the engine is cold, the fluidlevel should be between MIN andMAX on the dipstick.


10-18 Vehicle Care

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

A WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center(DIC) when windshield washer fluidneeds to be added to the vehicle.See Washer Fluid Messages onpage 5‑35 for more information.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for more informationon location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.


Vehicle Care 10-19

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.

If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.


10-20 Vehicle Care

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too muchfluid when new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑18.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-21

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑62 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑27.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).


10-22 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑27.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


Vehicle Care 10-23

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. For properwindshield wiper blade lengthand type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑12.

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not be

covered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.

2. Lift up on the plastic latch in themiddle of the wiper blade wherethe wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperblade to touch the windshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to the dealerfor service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑28.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

A. Sidemarker

B. Low-Beam Headlamp

C. High-Beam Headlamp

D. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp


Vehicle Care 10-25

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Remove the screw from theheadlamp assembly.

3. Pull up on the plastic headlampretainer and remove it.

4. Pull the headlamp assemblyaway from the vehicle andremove the electrical connector.

5. Remove the round dust caps togain access to the bulbs.

6. Turn the old bulbcounterclockwise and remove itfrom the retaining ring by pullingit away from the headlamp.

7. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by raising the locktab and pulling the connectoraway from the bulb's base.

8. Install the electrical connector tothe bulb.

9. Install the new bulb by insertingthe smallest tab on the bulbbase into the matching notch inthe retaining ring. Turn the bulba quarter-turn clockwise until itstops.

10. Reinstall the dust caps.


10-26 Vehicle Care

11. Push the headlamp assemblytoward the vehicle.

12. Push down on the plasticheadlamp retainer to reinstall it.

13. Reinstall the screw from theheadlamp assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

A. Rear Sidemarker Lamp

B. Back-up Lamp

C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑9.

2. Remove the convenience net (ifequipped). Unhook the net fromthe upper wing nut.

3. Turn the upper wing nutcounterclockwise and remove it.

4. Pull the carpet away from therear of the vehicle.

5. Turn the two hex nutscounterclockwise toremove them.

6. Pull out the taillamp assemblyand disconnect the wiringharness.

7. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove it.

8. Pull the old bulb straight out toremove it.

9. Push the new bulb straight inuntil it clicks to install it.

10. Reverse steps 1 through 7 toreinstall.


10-28 Vehicle Care

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws (A) fromthe license plate lamp assembly.

2. Pull the lamp assembly downand turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and out of thelamp assembly.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the license plate lampassembly.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Back-Up 921LL

Front Parking/TurnSignal

3157NAK

LicensePlate Lamp

194LL

Headlamps

High-Beam H9

Low-Beam H11

Sidemarker 194LL

Stoplamp,Taillamp, and TurnSignal

3057

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located on the passenger side ofthe engine compartment, by thebattery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on location.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-30 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not have all of thefuses, relays, and features shown.

Fuses Usage

A/C CMPRSR Air ConditioningCompressor

ABS MTR 1Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)Motor 1

ABS MTR 2 ABS Motor 2

AIR PUMP Air Pump

AIR SOLAir InjectionReactor Solenoid

AIRBAG/DISPLAY

Airbag, Display

AUX PWR Auxiliary Power

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 2 Battery 2

BATT 3 Battery 3

BATT 4 Battery 4

BCMBody ControlModule (BCM)


Vehicle Care 10-31

Fuses Usage

CHMSL/BCK-UP

CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp,Back-up Lamp

DISPLAY Display

DRL 1Daytime RunningLamps 1

DRL 2Daytime RunningLamps 2

ECM IGNEngine ControlModule (ECM),Ignition

ECM/TCM

ECM,TransmissionControlModule (TCM)

EMISSIONS 1 Emissions 1

EMISSIONS 2 Emissions 2

ETC/ECMElectronicThrottleControl, ECM

Fuses Usage

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FOG LAMPSFog Lamps (IfEquipped)

FSCMFuel SystemControl Module

HDLP MDLHeadlampModule

HORN Horn

HTD MIR Heated Mirror

IGN 1 Ignition 1

INJ 2 Injector 2

INT LIGHTS Interior Lamps

INT LTS/PNL DIM

Interior Lamps,Instrument PanelDimmer

LT HI BEAMDriver SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

LT LO BEAMDriver SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

LT PARKDriver SideParking Lamp

LT SPOT Left Spot

LT T/SIGDriver Side TurnSignal Lamp

ONSTAR OnStar

PWR DROP/CRANK

Power Drop,Crank

RADIO Audio System

RT HI BEAMPassenger SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

RT LO BEAMPassenger SideLow-BeamHeadlamp


10-32 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

RT PARK Passenger SideParking Lamp

RT SPOT Right Spot

RT T/SIGPassenger SideTurn Signal Lamp

RVC SENRegulatedVoltage ControlSensor

STRG WHL Steering Wheel

STRTR Starter

TRANS Transmission

VACUUM/PUMP

Vacuum Pump

WPR Wiper

WSW Windshield Wiper

Relay Usage

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

VAC/PUMP Vacuum Pump

PWR/TRN Powertrain

REARDEFOG Rear Defogger

STRTR Starter

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The fuse block is on the passengerside of the vehicle in the carpetmolding. Remove the fuse blockdoor to access the fuses.


Vehicle Care 10-33

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

AIRBAG Airbags

AMP Amplifier

AUX Auxiliary Outlets

CNSTR Canister

Fuses Usage

DR/LCK Door Locks

HTD/SEAT Heated Seats

PWR/MIR Power Mirrors

PWR/SEAT Power Seats

PWR/WNDW Power Window

RAPRetainedAccessory Power

S/ROOF Sunroof

TRUNK Trunk

TRUNK Trunk Relay

XM XM™ Radio

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.


10-34 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a sudden

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

impact— such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,


Vehicle Care 10-35

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are the

Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑49.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air and


10-36 Vehicle Care

gone flat. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑61 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑53.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑40.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.


Vehicle Care 10-37

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each squareinch of the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑40.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that faces


Vehicle Care 10-39

outward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑40 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑47.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑49.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.


Vehicle Care 10-41

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare tire, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare shouldbe at 420 kPa (60 psi). Foradditional information regardingthe compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑61.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)


10-42 Vehicle Care

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑43 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.

If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23 and TireMessages on page 5‑33.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑40.

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑45, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑46, and Tires onpage 10‑33.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


10-44 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfullyafter rotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑48.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,


Vehicle Care 10-45

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's Q and "buttons at the same time forapproximately five seconds. Thehorn sounds twice to signal thereceiver is in relearn mode andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.


10-46 Vehicle Care

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.

See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑47 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑51.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑40 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑43.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-47

WARNING (Continued)

In an emergency, a cloth or apaper towel can be used;however, use a scraper or wirebrush later to remove all rustor dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑45 and TireRotation on page 10‑46 for moreinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loading

conditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification (TPCSpec) system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the sameTPC Spec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof the vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size.

If the tires have an all‐seasontread design, the TPC Specnumber will be followed by MSfor mud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 10‑34for additional information.

GM recommends replacing allthe tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑45and Tire Rotation on page 10‑46for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.


Vehicle Care 10-49

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑41.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑48 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.


10-50 Vehicle Care

For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditionson a specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal MotorSafety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is established for atire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation,or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination,can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.


10-52 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑53 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination androad conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.


Vehicle Care 10-53

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairsis dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.


10-54 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment you will need islocated in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑9.

2. Remove the convenience net ifthe vehicle has one.

3. Remove the spare tire cover.

4. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise and remove it.


Vehicle Care 10-55

5. Remove the compact spare tire.

6. Turn the nut holding the jackcounterclockwise and remove it.Then remove the jack andwrench.

A. Jack

B. Extension and Protection Guide

C. Wheel Wrench

The tools you will need to change atire include the jack (A), extensionand protection guide (B), and wheelwrench (C).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

This vehicle may have aluminumwheels with exposed wheel nuts.Use the wheel wrench to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.

Or, this vehicle may have steelwheels with plastic covers.

To remove the plastic covers andwheel nut caps, loosen the plasticnut caps with the wheel wrench in acounterclockwise direction.


10-56 Vehicle Care

If needed, finish loosening themwith your fingers. The plastic nutcaps will not come off.

If needed, use the flat end of thewheel wrench and pry along theedge of the cover until it comes off.The edge of the wheel cover couldbe sharp, so do not try to remove itwith your bare hands. Do not dropthe cover or lay it face down,as it could become scratched ordamaged. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until the flat tire is repairedor replaced.

Once you have removed the wheelcover, use the following procedureto remove the flat tire and install thespare tire.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑53.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise once on eachwheel nut to loosen it. Do notremove them yet.

3. For all wheel types, find thejacking location using thediagram above and thecorresponding jacking notcheslocated on the bottom side of theplastic molding. The notches inthe plastic molding are markedwith a triangle shape to help youfind them.

The front location is about17.7 cm (7.0 in) from the rearedge of the front wheel well. Therear location is about 11.4 cm(4.5 in) from the front edge of therear wheel well.


Vehicle Care 10-57

4. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground to install the compactspare tire.

6. Remove all wheel nuts and theflat tire.


10-58 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

7. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

8. Install the compact spare tire.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Reinstall the wheel nuts with therounded end of the nuts towardthe wheel. Tighten each nutclockwise by hand until thewheel is held against the hub.


Vehicle Care 10-59

10. Lower the vehicle byturning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

11. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence asshown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

After the compact spare tire hasbeen installed on the vehicle, storethe flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use theextension with the extensionprotector, located in the foamholder, to help avoid wheel surfacedamage.

To store a full-size tire:

1. Install the tools in their originallocation in the trunk area andsecure.

2. Place the tire valve stem facingdown and the protector/guideplaced through a wheel bolt holeand threaded onto the boltscrew.

3. Remove the protector and attachthe retainer securely

4. Store the cover as far forward aspossible.

When storing a compact spare tirein the trunk, put the protector backin the foam holder.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑61. Use thisas a guide for storing the compactspare tire and tools. Compact Spare Tire

A. Cover

B. Retainer


Vehicle Care 10-61

C. Compact Spare Tire

D. Wing Nut

E. Jack

F. Wheel Wrench

G. Extension Protector

H. Foam Holder

I. Bolt Screw

Full-Size Flat Tire

A. Retainer

B. Full-Size Flat Tire

C. Protective Guide

D. Extension Bolt Screw

E. Wing Nut

F. Jack

G. Wheel Wrench

H. Foam Holder

I. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare TireIf this is a police vehicle, see“Compact Spare Tire” in the ImpalaPolice Package Supplement forcompact spare tire information.

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Although the compact spare tirewas fully inflated when the vehiclewas new, it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, you should stop assoon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 105 km/h(65 mph) for distances up to5 000 km (3,000 mi), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced where youwant. You must calibrate the tireinflation monitor system afterinstalling or removing the compactspare. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑41. The systemmay not work correctly when thecompact spare is installed on thevehicle. Of course, it's best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as you can. The spare willlast longer and be in good shape incase you need it again.

Notice: When the compactspare is installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheels ortires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑21.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

The jump start positive is located inthe engine compartment under theengine compartment fuse blockcover on the passenger side of thevehicle.

The jump start negative groundingpoint is the engine block or anengine mounting bolt. Connectto a spot as far away from thedischarged battery as possible.

These locations are used instead ofa direct connection to the battery.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.


10-64 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart positive (+) post (A). Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

6. Do not let the other end of thered positive (+) cable touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery (B). Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery (C). Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (–)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (–) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.


Vehicle Care 10-65

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to anunpainted heavy metal enginepart (D) away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the caps over thepositive (+) and negative (–)terminals to their originalpositions.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should betowed with all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. If the vehicle must betowed, a dolly should be used. See“Dolly Towing” that follows for moreinformation.

Dolly Towing

Use the following procedure to dollytow the vehicle from the front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint, metal,or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, tree

sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


Vehicle Care 10-69

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a mild

detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if theyare worn or damaged. Damagecan be caused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑11

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying

a tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to home


Vehicle Care 10-71

furnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. To preventoverspray, apply all cleaners directlyto the cleaning cloth. Cleanersshould be removed quickly. Neverallow cleaners to remain on thesurface being cleaned for extendedperiods of time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning the

interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 dropsper 3.78L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by one hook-type retainer.

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat toremove it from the hooks.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by liningup the openings on the floor matover the hooks and push it downinto position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-13

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule tohelp protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended eveningand Saturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Normal are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑33.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are forvehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑40.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑45.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑18.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Tire Rotation andRequired ServicesEvery 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommendedfor the vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑46.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑7 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑10.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑13.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑18.

. Visually inspect windshieldwiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑68. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑23.



. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑40.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑45.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑11.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑68.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑18.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑68.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑21.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑22.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑22.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑22.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑17.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑12.

e) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑12.

e) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break‐down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.



. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑70 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑68.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 10350737 A2962C

Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15284938 CF132

Spark Plugs 12622561 41‐109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side ‐ 55.0 cm (21.7 in) 15941731 —

Passenger Side ‐ 55.0 cm (21.7 in) 15941732 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, in the trunk, has thefollowing information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Automatic Transmission 5.0 L 5.3 qt

Cooling System Including Reservoir 8.7 L 9.1 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank (RPO FHO) 65.5 L 17.3 gal

Fuel Tank (RPO FHS) 66.3 L 17.5 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 3 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Manage your vehicle (U.S.) atchevrolet.com. Click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyChevrolet/Owners Login.”

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Chevrolet dealer locator for

service nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.



Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ. Contact Us

Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment

required for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.



Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.



. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.

General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported by

original receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation througha friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,



insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed from

vehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.



Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.

When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.



Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑25.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.



Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.



However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situationlike this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash-like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on data

collection and use and is availableat www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Push] to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it isequipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinationscan also be forwarded to thevehicle from Google Maps™ orMapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to yourdestination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Route Preview

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.


Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps™ and MapQuest.com totheir Turn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: PushQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can alsobe controlled from a cell phonethrough the OnStar mobile app.See www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds: ”About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® orAndroid™-based mobile device, anOnStar mobile app can bedownloaded. The vehicle can beremote started, if equipped, or thedoors can be unlocked fromanywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuellevel, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisoranytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.


OnStar 14-5

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca(Canada); contact OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQto speak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar’sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipmentor software is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyondOnStar’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricing andsign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturerof the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmedto respond in French or Spanish.PushQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.


14-8 OnStar

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑45. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Additional Information,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-21AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-14Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-32

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-23Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-18

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-28Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-27

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-15CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-22

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-41

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47, 3-49Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70


INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-18Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7


i-4 INDEX

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-29Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Engine (cont'd)Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Cooling System Messages . . .5-29Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-10Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38


INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont'd)Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-34Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Requirements, California . . . . .9-34System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Gauges (cont'd)Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamps (cont'd)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-23High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12


i-6 INDEX

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-31Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-34LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Lamps (cont'd)Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

LightElectronic Stability Control(ESC), Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8LightingDelayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-18Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-22Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-13Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


INDEX i-7

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-16Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-32Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-29Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Messages (cont'd)Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-31Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-33Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8


i-8 INDEX

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-22

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-26Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5


INDEX i-9

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-33Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-18

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-29Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-29Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-18Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-16

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-49

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-13


i-10 INDEX

Service (cont'd)Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-21Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-42Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-41Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37


INDEX i-11

Tires (cont'd)Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-51When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-39Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-39Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-66Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-27

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-40Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle (cont'd)Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-35Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35


i-12 INDEX

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-40Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-23

2012 chevrolet impala owner manual m · chevrolet impala owner manual - 2012 black plate (3,1)...

Documents